<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en-GB">
	<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Lbw</id>
	<title>Portal - User contributions [en-gb]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Lbw"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php/Special:Contributions/Lbw"/>
	<updated>2026-05-08T06:37:25Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.8</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=270</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=270"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T15:56:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Menu'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id if maintained.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows stock codeinformation by Product Catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-YYY.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report Extract - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-X22.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Logout'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-YYY.png&amp;diff=269</id>
		<title>File:PORT-YYY.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-YYY.png&amp;diff=269"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T14:28:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=268</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=268"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T14:28:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Reports  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id if maintained.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows stock codeinformation by Product Catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-YYY.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report Extract - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-X22.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Logout'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=267</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=267"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T14:26:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Reports  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id if maintained.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows stock codeinformation by Product Catalogue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-XXX.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report Extract - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-X22.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Logout'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-XXX.png&amp;diff=266</id>
		<title>File:PORT-XXX.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-XXX.png&amp;diff=266"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T14:25:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=265</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=265"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T14:25:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Reports  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id if maintained.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows stock codes &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-XXX.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report Extract - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-X22.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Logout'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=264</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=264"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T12:17:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Reports  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id if maintained.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report Extract - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-X22.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Logout'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-X22.png&amp;diff=263</id>
		<title>File:PORT-X22.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-X22.png&amp;diff=263"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T11:55:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=262</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=262"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T11:52:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Reports  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id if maintained.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Product Usage Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report Extract - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-X22.png|border|Product Catalogue| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Logout'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=261</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=261"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T11:47:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Reports  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id if maintained.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Logout'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-032a.png&amp;diff=260</id>
		<title>File:PORT-032a.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-032a.png&amp;diff=260"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T11:44:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=259</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=259"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T11:08:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Enquiry  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id if maintained.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=258</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=258"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T10:58:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Enquiry  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including transactional quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=257</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=257"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T10:54:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Enquiry  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=256</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=256"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T10:52:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Enquiry  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location/Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials''' &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=255</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=255"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T10:47:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Enquiry  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=254</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=254"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T10:45:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Enquiry  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Stock Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=253</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=253"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T10:36:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Enquiry -  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=252</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=252"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T10:32:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Order Entry  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=251</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=251"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T10:11:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Delivery Types  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Delivery Type| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a Delivery Type record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=250</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=250"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T09:16:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  News  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or to a specific group which is selected from the drop down list.                                                    &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=249</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=249"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T09:16:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  News  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or a specific group which is selected from the drop down list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=248</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=248"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T09:16:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  News  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be visible to all groups or a specific group which is selected from the drop down list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=247</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=247"/>
		<updated>2012-01-26T09:15:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  News  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
News items are assigned at group level, and can be to all groups or a specific group which is selected from the drop down list. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The type of news item is then selected from the drop down list with choices of text, attachment or scrolling. Attachments can be uploaded from a desktop PC &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=246</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=246"/>
		<updated>2012-01-25T15:51:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  News  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of options for displaying news items to be displayed on the end users home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Scrolling News Banner &lt;br /&gt;
* Headline News&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-x01.png&amp;diff=245</id>
		<title>File:PORT-x01.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-x01.png&amp;diff=245"/>
		<updated>2012-01-25T15:39:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=244</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=244"/>
		<updated>2012-01-25T15:33:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  News  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-x01.png|border|News Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=243</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=243"/>
		<updated>2012-01-25T14:13:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=242</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=242"/>
		<updated>2012-01-25T14:11:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''User Maintenance'''     ===                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-055.png&amp;diff=241</id>
		<title>File:PORT-055.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-055.png&amp;diff=241"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T13:40:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=240</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=240"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T13:11:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''User Maintenance'''     ===                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-055.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=239</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=239"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:55:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''User Maintenance'''     ===                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Option - WMS'''&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting the module option from the users account allows for the detailed parameters to be set for the user as referenced from the Group Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=238</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=238"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:42:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''User Maintenance'''     ===                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=237</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=237"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:41:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
After making a group selection it is then possible to select the 'USER' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=236</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=236"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:38:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=235</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=235"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:37:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=234</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=234"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:35:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Group Options */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=233</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=233"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:35:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - Options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - Options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=232</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=232"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:34:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrictions page restricts the group to the level of data that they are allowed to access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=231</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=231"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:31:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:* The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:* Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options Include - '''&lt;br /&gt;
:* Company&lt;br /&gt;
:* Warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
:* Owner &lt;br /&gt;
:* Customer &lt;br /&gt;
:* Delivery Type&lt;br /&gt;
:* Catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-054.png&amp;diff=230</id>
		<title>File:PORT-054.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-054.png&amp;diff=230"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:29:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=229</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=229"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:28:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Restrictions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-054.png|border|Group Maintenance/Restrictions  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=228</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=228"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:26:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - options include Disabled, Order Entry, Order Copy, All Orders - allows limits to be set against the user entering the order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - Options include By user and for user - linked to the order check limit function.  &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - options include Customer and user - the address that will be automatically displayed when entering an order. &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - Yes/No - whether it is possible to change the order address &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - Any/Mobile - For printing formats, standard is 'Any'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=227</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=227"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:20:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /* Home Page */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
:*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
:*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
:*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
:*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-053.png&amp;diff=226</id>
		<title>File:PORT-053.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=File:PORT-053.png&amp;diff=226"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:19:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=225</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=225"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:18:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Module Options'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The module options page allows for additional restrictions to be placed against the group's users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Check Limit - &lt;br /&gt;
:* Count Orders - &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Type - &lt;br /&gt;
:* Default Address Locked - &lt;br /&gt;
:* Order Receipt Format - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=224</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=224"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T11:10:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows for creation and maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list. &lt;br /&gt;
:*The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
:*The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=223</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=223"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T10:39:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance page allows maintenance of user group information – Access to this page is restricted to user groups of level “0”, “1” and “2”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-053.png|border|Group Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select the user group to maintain from the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
The list contains all user groups with owner codes the user group is allowed visibility of.&lt;br /&gt;
The user group level will be equal to or below the current user group level.&lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a user group from the drop-down will automatically display the details for that group:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''' Group Level – '''This is the security level for the user, which determines the visibility of maintenance screens&lt;br /&gt;
and some the actions which the user can perform:&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 0 - OBS Group - The highest level group - restricted to OBS users.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 1 - System Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner creation. They can also edit events and order details.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 2 Admin Group - This group level has access to all of the maintenance screens with the&lt;br /&gt;
exception of owner maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Level 3 Useer Group - This group level has no access to any maintenance functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: A user can only set the group level to less than or equal to their own group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
E.g. a level 2 user cannot set a level to Level 1 or 0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Type – ''' This defines the type of group. Values are “Internal”, “External” or “Haulier”. This setting is used in the Events maintenance screen to determine which events are visible and is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group. If the group type is “Haulier” the Haulier button on the page will be enabled.              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Group Style –''' This defines the screen styles applied to the application once the user has logged onto the system and their user group is identified. The list of styles available is based on the styles for each owner the user group has visibility of. This is only maintainable by users in a level “0” or “1” user group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''##########''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=222</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=222"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T10:26:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username, and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=221</id>
		<title>Calidus Portal User Guide - CORE</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://calidusassist.adcservices.apteancloud.com/calidus-assist/Portal/index.php?title=Calidus_Portal_User_Guide_-_CORE&amp;diff=221"/>
		<updated>2012-01-12T10:26:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Lbw: /*  Group/User  */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calidus Online System (C-OS)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Calidus Online System is primarily used by the sales team of the 3rd party client to place orders for products via a web portal onto the Calidus WMS. Though there is the ability if required for customers to place their own orders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ordering system is supported by enquiries and reports and can be plugged in to both versions of the Calidus 3pl WMS (Current system versions are Oracle 7.70 and 4.14).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition Calidus Online allows web interrogation of the Calidus Warehouse Management System.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The web ordering module has the following key features:                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                          &lt;br /&gt;
* Login Security                                                                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* User maintenance with contact details and feature control                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Stock Catalogue maintenance and definable visibility for users                     &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Entry - by a user, or by an administrator on behalf of other users           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* E-mail notification of order status changes.                                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer Address and Delivery Options                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Copy facility                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order Enquiry                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order &amp;amp; Stock Catalogue reporting                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Multi-Lingual capability                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Calidus Online '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A webpage is provided that validates the log-on credentials of the users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORTa-001.png|border|Logon Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your provided username and password at this point and click '''Logon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Home Page''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon successful log-on, you will be taken to the main Calidus Online screen. You can return to this screen at any time by clicking the Home option on the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Warehouse id and Owner id will automatically default with the values entered when the user account was created, though they are maintainable. The contents of the screen and menu will vary, depending on the set-up of your user. If your user has been configured to allow for multiple Warehouses and Owners, you can select them from drop-down lists provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any Current News items will be displayed on the Home page,as either a scrolling news bar or as a news summary which can also include attachments for download.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting on the folder option on the left hand side of the screen it is possible to navigate through the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-002.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your password by clicking the Change Password button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the action you want to do from the main menu on the left of the form. The options are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*	Home - Return to this screen &lt;br /&gt;
*       Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Maintenance - See the configured users. &lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Enquiries - Enquire on the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
*       WMS Ordering&lt;br /&gt;
*	WMS Reports - Run pre-configured order reports (not enabled for this configuration) &lt;br /&gt;
*	Logout - exit from the system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' Group/User ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
The User Group Maintenance Users page allows maintenance and creation of group and user information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-050.png|border|Group/User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User Maintenance'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user has the option to create a new user by entering a Username and Description in the ‘User Creation’ section of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-051.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password for the user will initially be set to the username , and the user group will be set to the user group currently being maintained. Language will be set to ‘English’.&lt;br /&gt;
Once created, the new user, or any existing user belonging to the user group currently being maintained may be selected from the drop-down. Selecting a user from the drop-down will bring up the details for the user:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-052.png|border|User Maintenance Detail  | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Password – The password for the user, which may be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
:*User Group – This determines the privileges for the user. The list of available user groups will be limited to groups that the maintaining user has visibility of which are at the same or a lower security level.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Active - Whether the user is Active or Inactive, the default is active.&lt;br /&gt;
A button is available to update any changes made or to delete the selected user from the user group (and, effectively the system).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ''' News ''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Stock''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the system there is the option to create and maintain catalogues containing the clients product codes. There is also the option to capture additional information against the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a Product Catalogue '''                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new catalogue, Select By ‘Catalogue’ and ‘Not Catalogued’ then select the Find button.                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-003a.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will bring back all products codes which are not currently in a catalogue and are within the client data set and will then be available for selection . &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-004.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                               &lt;br /&gt;
When the required stock codes have been selected using the tick boxes down the right hand side of the form, enter in a new catalogue name and description and then select the Add button, the new catalogue will be created with the selected stock codes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining a Product Catalogue'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Catalogue, and then select the Catalogue to be updated from the drop down list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-005.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the stock codes that are to be updated then select the required action from the drop down box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Options include -''' Add To, Move To, Delete From, Update Description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Maintenance '''                                                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select by Product Code and then enter the actual product code as known by the system, the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-006.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the required record has been returned select on the product code &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional but optional details that can be held against a product for web ordering include –'''  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
* Web Description                                                                      &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum Order Amount                                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Quantity Rounding’s                                                                  &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Order UOM and Order Factor                                                           &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If details have been entered or amended select the ‘Save’ button to update the stock code details.          &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There is also an option to upload a picture image of the stock code using the Stock Image functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As above there is also an option to select by description if the stock code is not known, as for Product Code the system will recognise a partial code and is not case sensitive when searching for a matching record. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                      &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Product Code to be updated and the system will call the Stock Details screen as  above. The same values as when updating by Product code can be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                       &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Delivery Types '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering order details it is possible to select a delivery type, which will work out the service level for when the delivery is to be made by, i.e. next day delivery, 5 day delivery etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Creating a New Delivery Type – '''                                &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a New Delivery Type and Description and then select the ‘Create Delivery Type’ &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-007.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the Delivery Type – &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintaining the Delivery Type '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-008.png|border|Home Page | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Once the Delivery Type has been created the details must be updated – '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fields include:                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Availability – Available, Restricted, Unavailable                       &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:No Days – Numeric value                                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
:Day Type – Delivery or Normal                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Day – Day off the week                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Cut Off Time – Numeric Time                                             &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any changes or future updates can be saved using the ‘Save Changes’ button, it is also possible to delete a record by finding it then using the ‘Delete Delivery Type’ button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Order Entry '''==&lt;br /&gt;
To place an order against the WMS, select Ordering then Order Entry from the left hand menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-009.png|border|Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete the order a set of mandatory information is required, which consists of the Customer and associated address information, product codes and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''User –'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-010.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When entering an order the system will automatically default in the user id of the person entering the order, but it is also possible to enter an order onto the system on the behalf of another user by using the ‘User Selection’ option to produce a drop down list of valid users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customer -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-011.png|border|User Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A valid customer is also required before the order can be submitted to the WMS, using the customer selection a drop down list of valid customer codes will be displayed for the user to select from. &lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to configure the user profile to display a restricted selection of customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product - '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the Product button the user will be able to select a stock item by catalogue, product code or description. The user profile will determine which products and catalogues are visible to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-012a.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A product code must be entered against the order; options for selecting the product are by Catalogue, Product Code or Product Description. &lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Catalogue only product codes which are linked to that particular catalogue are displayed &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Catalogue -'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-013.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the required catalogue from the drop down list, the system will then display all product codes which are associated with that catalogue. By placing an order quantity against the required stock codes and then selecting the ‘Add to Order’ button the line will then be added to the order. It is possible to select multiple product codes to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''By Product -'''                                                               &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by product code it is possible to directly enter the stock code if known, or a partial code can be entered. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-014.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘hap’ and will produce a list as below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-015.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By Description -'''                                                              &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting by Description it is possible to directly enter the code if known, or enter a partial description. It is also possible to display all product codes linked to the user by leaving the field blank and entering the ‘Find’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-016.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above the system will be searched for product codes containing the characters ‘PAF’ in their description and will produce a list as below. ''It is then possible to enter quantites against the product to include them in the sales order.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-017.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Address -'''                                                                         &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The address details are pulled back from the Customer Maintenance records on the WMS, and are displayed for the selected customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-018.png|border|Product - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enter an adhoc customer address and this will be used for the sales order when being passed over to the WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Overview -'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-019.png|border|Overview - Order Entry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview screen showing the details of the sales order, Order and Customer reference are both optional fields though a Delivery Date is mandatory. The delivery date can be calculated by the system when a maintained ‘Delivery Type’ is selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to enter pick and despatch text which can be printed on pick and despatch documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By selecting the ‘Submit Order’ the sales order will automatically be placed on to the linked WMS. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the order is not required or lines need to be amend it is possible to cancel the order using the ‘Delete Order’ button or to amend the line details of the order by selecting the relevant line and selecting ‘Delete Line’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Enquiry - '''==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Enquiry'''&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on a submitted order, to check it status and details &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-020.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the option to enquire by, System Order Number, On-line Reference and by the Customer Reference &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-021.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Enquiry screen will display all relevant information for the order including all reference numbers, order status, Customer and address details and any picking or despatch text plus all order lines for the order. &lt;br /&gt;
Further actions within this screen allow the user to either cancel the order dependent on order status or to make a copy of the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order History '''                                                          &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-022.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enquire on an orders history - &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The selection criteria is by User, Customer and date range, all values are selected by using the drop down boxes, when the required values have been entered select the ‘Show Orders’ button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-023.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock Enquiry '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Owner''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Returns summary stock records by warehouse id for a selected owner &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-024.png|border|Stock Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Warehouse''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection is by owner, any warehouse which is holding stock for the selected owner code will be included within the returned query. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-025.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enquiry screen showing by warehouse the summary figures for the selected owner code&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Stock '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-026.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a Warehouse ID the enquiry will then display all the stock codes within the warehouse and their summary quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Location '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-027.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a stock code will allow the user to drill down and view details at a location level including location quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pallet '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-028.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
By drilling down into the location code, a breakdown by pallet will be displayed including quantities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Selecting a pallet line for serial controlled stock code will display the serial data for that product code and pallet id.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports '''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Usage'''                                                                   &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The product usage report will provide either an Excel Spreadsheet or open in a new web page displaying the data by catalogue, stock code and quantity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-029a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Report extract - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-031.png|border|Web Order Enquiry| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Product Catalogue - '''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-032a.png|border|Web Order Enquiry | 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Web Order Report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is the function to allow the reporting of orders, and to create either a web report extract or as an Excel Spreadsheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-033a.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selection Parameters are optional and include –                                 &amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Select by User or by Group &lt;br /&gt;
: Product Type&lt;br /&gt;
: Order Status &lt;br /&gt;
: Order Source&lt;br /&gt;
: Stock Code&lt;br /&gt;
: Date Range&lt;br /&gt;
: Report Level, either Order or Detail level&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Report Extract Example -''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[image:PORT-034.png|border|Web Order Report| 650px ]]&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Logout'''&lt;br /&gt;
Will give you the option to exit the system and return the user to them main logon menu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Document History==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| Border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Version'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Date'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Status'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Reason'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;'''Initials'''&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;Version 1&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;08/03/2011&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;In Progress&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;User Guide&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;center&amp;gt;LBW&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copyright OBS Logistics © 2008&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The information contained herein is the property of OBS Logistics and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part may be reproduced or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Lbw</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>